project manual - linnbentonthe new combined building area will total 7,185 sf. b. type of contract:...

PROJECT MANUAL

Linn-Benton Housing Authority 1250 Queen Ave. SE

Albany, Oregon 97322

Varitone Architecture LLC 231 SW 2nd Ave.

PO Box 3420


Project Contacts

Owner

Linn-Benton Housing Authority

Donna Holt, Director

1250 Queen Ave. SE


United States

541-926-4497

Principal Architect

Varitone Architecture LLC (Christina Larson)

231 SW 2nd Ave.


United States

541-497-2954

Civil Engineer

Project Delivery Group (Keith Whisenhunt)

3772 Portland Road NE

Salem, Oregon 97301

United States

503-364-4004

Structural Engineer

Stability Engineering Inc. (Shawn Stoneberg)

1600 SW Western Blvd.

Corvallis, Oregon 97333

United States

541-223-5360

Table of Contents

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

002513 - Prebid Meetings

003119 - Existing Condition Information

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 - Summary

012500 - Substitution Procedures

012600 - Contract Modification Procedures

012900 - Payment Procedures

013100 - Project Management and Coordination

013200 - Construction Progress Documentation

013300 - Submittal Procedures

017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal

017700 - Closeout Procedures

017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 - Selective Demolition

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 - Rough Carpentry

061600 - Sheathing

061753 - Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses

064116 - Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071700 - Bentonite Waterproofing

072100 - Thermal Insulation

072500 - Weather Barriers

073113 - Asphalt Shingles

074113.16 - Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels

074646 - Fiber-Cement Siding

076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

079200 - Joint Sealants

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081100 - Knockdown Metal Doors and Frames

081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

081416 - Flush Wood Doors

084113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

085313 - Vinyl Windows

087111 - Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)

088300 - Mirrors

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092900 - Gypsum Board

095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings

096500 - Resilient Flooring, General

096513 - Resilient Base and Accessories

096516 - Resilient Sheet Flooring

096813 - Tile Carpeting

097720 - FRP – Special Wall Surfacing

099000 - Paints and Coatings

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

102800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

104400 - Fire Protection Specialties

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

123623.13 - Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142400 - Hydraulic Elevators

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

224000 - Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

265000 - Lighting

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321313 - Concrete Paving

321723 - Pavement Markings

NOTE: Mechancial, Electrical, Plumbing, Low-Voltage, and Access Control for the project will

be design-build. Selected contractors will be required to coordinate with owner and architect

regarding design and specifications. Drawings shown in architectural plans depict concept only.

002513 PREBID MEETINGS LBHA Addition

Varitone Architecture LLC Page 1 of 2 5/30/2017

SECTION 002513 - PREBID MEETINGS

PART 1 - Prebid Meetings

1.1 PREBID MEETING

A. Attendance:

1. Prime Bidders: Attendance at Prebid meeting is mandatory. 2. Notice: Bids will only be accepted from prime bidders represented on Prebid Meeting

sign-in sheet.

B. Bidder Questions: Submit written questions to be addressed at Prebid meeting minimum of two business days prior to meeting.

C. Agenda: Prebid meeting agenda will include review of topics that may affect proper preparation and submittal of bids, including the following:

1. Procurement and Contracting Requirements:

a. Advertisement for Bids. b. Instructions to Bidders. c. Bidder Qualifications. d. Bonding. e. Insurance. f. Bid Security. g. Bid Form and Attachments. h. Bid Submittal Requirements. i. Bid Submittal Checklist. j. Notice of Award.

2. Communication during Bidding Period:

a. Obtaining documents. b. Access to Project Web site. c. Bidder's Requests for Information. d. Bidder's Substitution Request/Prior Approval Request. e. Addenda.

3. Contracting Requirements:

a. Agreement. b. The General Conditions. c. The Supplementary Conditions. d. Other Owner requirements.

4. Construction Documents:

a. Scopes of Work. b. Temporary Facilities. c. Use of Site.

002513 PREBID MEETINGS LBHA Addition


d. Work Restrictions. e. Alternates, Allowances, and Unit Prices. f. Substitutions following award.

5. Separate Contracts:

a. Work by Owner. b. Work of Other Contracts.

6. Schedule:

a. Project Schedule. b. Contract Time. c. Liquidated Damages. d. Other Bidder Questions.

7. Site/facility visit or walkthrough. 8. Post-Meeting Addendum.

D. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to attendees. Minutes of meeting are issued as Available Information and do not constitute a modification to the Procurement and Contracting Documents. Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents are issued by written Addendum only.

END OF SECTION 002513

003119 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

LBHA Addition


SECTION 003119 - EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

PART 1 - Existing Condition Information

1.1 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION

A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents.

B. Existing drawings that include information on existing conditions including previous construction at Project site are available for viewing on Project Web site.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.


004133 BID FORM - COST-PLUS-FEE (SINGLE-PRIME CONTRACT)

LBHA Addition


SECTION 004133 - BID FORM - COST-PLUS-FEE (SINGLE-PRIME CONTRACT)

PART 1 - Bid Form - Cost-Plus-Fee (Single-Prime Contract)

1.1 BID INFORMATION

A. Bidder: ____________________________________________________.

B. Project Name: Linn-Benton Housing Authority Building Addition and Remodel.

C. Project Location: 1250 SE Queen Avenue, Albany OR 97322.

D. Owner: Donna Holt.

E. Architect: Varitone Architecture.

F. Architect Project Number: VA16-0034.

1.2 CERTIFICATIONS AND CONTRACTOR'S FEE

A. Base Bid, Single-Prime (All Trades) Cost-Plus-Fee Contract: The undersigned Bidder, having carefully examined the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and all subsequent Addenda, as prepared by Varitone Architecture LLC and Architect's consultants, having visited the site, and being familiar with all conditions and requirements of the Work, hereby agrees to furnish all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to complete the construction of the above-named project, according to the requirements of the Procurement and Contracting Documents, for the Cost of the Work as defined in the Contract Documents, plus the following Contractor's Fee of:

1. ________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________).

1.3 GUARANTEED MAXIMUM PRICE

A. The undersigned Bidder will guarantee that the Contract Sum, consisting of the Cost of the Work plus the Contractor's Fee, referred to in the Contract Documents as the Guaranteed Maximum Price, shall not exceed the following:

1. ________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________).

1.4 BID GUARANTEE

A. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute a contract for this Work in the above amount and to furnish surety as specified within 10 days after a written Notice of Award, if offered within 60 days after receipt of bids, and on failure to do so agrees to forfeit to Owner the attached cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond, as liquidated damages for such failure, in the following amount constituting five percent (5%) of the Base Bid amount above:


LBHA Addition


1. ________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________).

B. In the event Owner does not offer a Notice of Award within the time limits stated above, Owner will return to the undersigned the cash, cashier's check, certified check, U.S. money order, or bid bond.

1.5 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

A. The following companies shall execute subcontracts for the portions of the Work indicated:

1. Concrete Work: __________________________________________________________ 2. Masonry Work:___________________________________________________________ 3. Roofing Work: ___________________________________________________________ 4. Plumbing Work: __________________________________________________________ 5. HVAC Work: ____________________________________________________________ 6. Electrical Work:

___________________________________________________________

1.6 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA

A. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges receipt of and use of the following Addenda in the preparation of this Bid:

1. Addendum No. 1, dated ____________________. 2. Addendum No. 2, dated ____________________. 3. Addendum No. 3, dated ____________________. 4. Addendum No. 4, dated ____________________.

1.7 BID SUPPLEMENTS

A. The following supplements are a part of this Bid Form and are attached hereto:

1. Bid Form Supplement - Unit Prices. 2. Bid Form Supplement - Bid Bond Form (AIA Document A310).

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE

A. The undersigned further states that it is a duly licensed contractor, for the type of work proposed, in City of Albany, and that all fees, permits, etc., pursuant to submitting this proposal have been paid in full.

1.9 SUBMISSION OF BID

A. Respectfully submitted this ____ day of ____________, 2017.

B. Submitted By:___________________________________(Name of bidding firm or corporation).

C. Authorized Signature:___________________________________(Handwritten signature).

D. Signed By:______________________________________________(Type or print name).


LBHA Addition


E. Title:___________________________________(Owner/Partner/President/Vice President).

F. Witness By:___________________________________________(Handwritten signature).

G. Attest:________________________________________________(Handwritten signature).

H. By:____________________________________________________(Type or print name).

I. Title:_________________________________(Corporate Secretary or Assistant Secretary).

J. Street Address:___________________________________________________________.

K. City, State, Zip___________________________________________________________.

L. Phone:__________________________________________________________________.

M. License No.:_____________________________________________________________.

N. Federal ID No.:_____________________________________(Affix Corporate Seal Here).


011000 SUMMARY LBHA Addition


SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work by Owner. 5. Purchase contracts. 6. Owner-furnished products. 7. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 8. Access to site. 9. Coordination with occupants. 10. Work restrictions. 11. Specification and drawing conventions. 12. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Linn-Benton Housing Authority Addition and Remodel, VA16-0034.

1. Project Location: 1250 SE Queen Avenue, Albany OR 97322.

B. Owner: Donna Holt, Director. 1250 SE Queen Avenue, Albany OR 97322.

C. Architect: Varitone Architecture LLC, 541-497-2954.

D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Civil Engineer: Project Delivery Group LLC, 503-364-4004. 2. Structural Engineer: Shawn Stoneberg, Stability Engineering Inc, 541-223-5360

E. Project Web Site: A project Web site administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.



1. See Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." for requirements for establishing using the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. The existing 3,025 SF office building will be remodeled. A 4,160 SF, two story addition will be added to the South side of the building. The new combined building area will total 7,185 SF.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. The Work shall be conducted in several phases, with each phase substantially complete as determined by owner. After contractor is award the project, a meeting will be scheduled between contractor and owner to evaluate owners needs and determine the best phased approach to the project. It is necessary for the owner to stay open during the renovation and addition construction.

B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work.

1.6 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.

1. IT work will be performed by the owners own low voltage company..

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Kitchen appliances.. 2. Office Furniture and Equipment.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.



B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet beyond building perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter; 15 feet beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Thursday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES LBHA Addition


SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A.

1. Substitution Request Form: Contractor's own form is acceptable, provided it contains all required information.Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.



d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:



a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. d. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. e. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

LBHA Addition


SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

LBHA Addition





012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES LBHA Addition


SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.

2. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 011000 "Summary."



B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location. b. Contractor's name and address. c. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.



G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. Schedule of values. 2. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work

of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 3. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Initial progress report. 5. Report of preconstruction conference. 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.




013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

LBHA Addition


SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.


1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.


LBHA Addition


1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

2. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

3. Electrical Work: Show the following:


LBHA Addition


a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

4. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

5. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.


LBHA Addition


D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.


LBHA Addition


B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Submittal procedures. i. Work restrictions. j. Owner's occupancy requirements. k. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. l. Construction waste management and recycling. m. Parking availability.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority

and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Status of submittals. 2) Site utilization. 3) Status of correction of deficient items.


LBHA Addition


4) Field observations. 5) Status of RFIs. 6) Pending changes. 7) Status of Change Orders. 8) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.




013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

LBHA Addition


SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Special reports.


1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.


LBHA Addition



A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

F. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including [phasing], [work stages], [area separations], [interim

milestones], [and] [partial Owner occupancy]. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.


LBHA Addition


B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Seasonal variations.


LBHA Addition


4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Installation. e. Tests and inspections. f. Curing.

5. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion.

D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

F. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:


LBHA Addition


1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling.


LBHA Addition


1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in

the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES LBHA Addition


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.



1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Autocad or PDF format..

c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect.

d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:

1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.



4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

a. Structural. b. HVAC c. Plumbing d. Electrical e. Casework

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title.



j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively]. p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. q. Other necessary identification. r. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. e. <Insert required information>.

E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project.



a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Operational range diagrams. c. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Compliance with specified standards. c. Notation of coordination requirements. d. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. e. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.



2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches , but no larger than 30 by 42 inches .

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.



E. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

F. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

G. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

B. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

C. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.


017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

LBHA Addition


SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.


1. Section 024116 "Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

LBHA Addition



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES LBHA Addition


SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.



1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. [Use CSI

Form 14.1A.]

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.



4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PLEASE NOTE: THIS IS A REOCCURRING ISSUE FOR LVT FLOORING. PLEASE REVIEW ALL MANUFACTURER INFORMATION AND DO NOT USE PRODUCTS FOR FINAL CLEANING THAT ARE NOT RECOMMENDED BY THE FLOORING MANUFACTURER.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.



i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

l. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.


017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

LBHA Addition


SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Product maintenance manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect [and Commissioning Authority] will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:


LBHA Addition


1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer Comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.

C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents.


LBHA Addition


3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, [loose-leaf][post-type] binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, [and] subject matter of contents[, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine]. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components


LBHA Addition


of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Operating standards. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Control diagrams. 6. Piped system diagrams. 7. Precautions against improper use. 8. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.


LBHA Addition


E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:


LBHA Addition


1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.


LBHA Addition


D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION LBHA Addition


SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 013591 "Historic Treatment Procedures" for historic removal and dismantling. 3. Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for temporary protection of

existing trees and plants that are affected by selective demolition. 4. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 5. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.



B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.



B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain [fire watch and] portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.



B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 073113 "Asphalt Shingles " for new roofing requirements.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be [recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site [and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill].

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management

and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LBHA Addition


SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete.

2. Section 035300 "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron-aggregate concrete floor toppings.

3. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 4. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 5. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and

walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.



1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. [Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.]

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 .

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301 . 2. ACI 117 .



2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.

b. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. c. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch , minimum.

D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 , deformed.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

B. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.



2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, [Type I][Type II][Type I/II][Type III][Type V], [gray][white].

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M [and potable].

2.6 WATERSTOPS

A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch .

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: 110-mil-thick, semiflexible, seven-ply sheet membrane consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified asphalt layers, protective weathercoating, and removable plastic release liner. Furnish manufacturer's accessories, including bonding asphalt, pointing mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: 0.0011 grains/h x sq. ft. x inches Hg ; ASTM E 154. 3. Tensile Strength: 140 lbf/inch ; ASTM E 154. 4. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf ; ASTM E 154.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following][provide one of the following][available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:


B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.



C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 .

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.



2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.47. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches , plus or minus 1 inch . 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for [1-inch ][3/4-inch

] nominal maximum aggregate size.

B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.47. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: [470 lb/cu. yd. ][520 lb/cu. yd. ][540 lb/cu.

yd. ]. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches , plus or minus 1 inch . 5. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for [1-inch ][3/4-inch

] nominal maximum aggregate size. 7. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. , increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. .

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 , to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 .

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair bituminous vapor retarder according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.



B. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least [one-fourth]<Insert depth> of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch . Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.8 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 .

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 . 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6



inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 , for a randomly trafficked floor surface:



a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.-long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch .

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.



2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches , and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch . Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.



D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.



C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. , but less than 25 cu. yd. , plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; [ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete;] one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure [two]<Insert number> sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi .

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other



requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.


061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY LBHA Addition


SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Shear wall panels. 4. Wood blocking and nailers. 5. Wood furring. 6. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment. 2. Section 061753 "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from dimension

lumber.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.

C. OSB: Oriented strand board.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.




A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.

C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load bearing. 2. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. c. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. d. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. e. Northern species; NLGA. f. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. g. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

B. Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Exterior walls and interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species:

a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.



2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Comply with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.

1. Manufacturers: t to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. TrusJoist or Equal

2. Web Material: [Either OSB or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1][Plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1][Plywood, complying with DOC PS 1, Exterior grade].

3. Structural Properties: Depths and design values not less than those indicated.

B. Insulated Rim Boards: Insulated product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.

1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Rim Board Material: product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and

veneers. 3. Rim Board Thickness: 1-1/4 inches . 4. Inside Facing: 7/16-inch-thick OSB. 5. Comply with APA PRR-401, rim board grade. Factory mark rim boards with APA-EWS

trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA-EWS standard.

2.4 SHEAR WALL PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product ct to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings]<Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Weyerhaeuser Company

C. Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing.

D. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.



2. Nailers. 3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: [Construction or No. 2][Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade lumber of [any of the following species:][the following species:]

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: [15][19] percent maximum moisture content and [any of] the following species and grades:

1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2-inch ][3/4-inch ] nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following][provide products by one of the following][available manufacturers offering



products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

B. Basis-of-Design Product ct to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

C. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate [furring,] nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

E. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.

H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.



J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

K. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

L. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring [horizontally] [and] [vertically] at [24 inches ][600 mm] o.c.

C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at [16 inches ][400 mm] o.c.

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions [and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs]. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated.

1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced [24 inches ][16 inches ][600 mm][400 mm] o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.



B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs[, except that two studs may be used for interior non-load-bearing partitions].

C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.

1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.

2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated.

3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows:

1. Where supported on wood members, by [toe nailing or by] using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if

not indicated, by using metal joist hangers.

B. Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches and do not embed more than 4 inches .

C. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches .

D. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than one-third depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom.

E. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band.

F. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports.

G. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4-by-1-1/4-inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to three joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches beyond bend.

H. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings.

I. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above.

1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures.

J. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists.



1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal-size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists.

2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements:

1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal size, minimum. 2. Material: solid lumber. 3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-

1/2 inches of effective depth. 4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch clear width of stair.

B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes [wet][wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified], apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


061600 SHEATHING LBHA Addition


SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.



2.3 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: [DOC PS 1][Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2], Exterior sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0.

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: [DOC PS 1][Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2], Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 15/32 inch .

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.


C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01][ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.



E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Subflooring:

a. [Glue and nail][Nail][Nail or staple] to wood framing.

2. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. [Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels.]

b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.


061753 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

LBHA Addition


SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood floor trusses.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.

1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required.

2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss

members due to design loads. 4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent

buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal

connector plates. 6. Show splice details and bearing details.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.


LBHA Addition


1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI,"Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."

1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:

a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/480 of span.

C. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.


LBHA Addition


2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer.

B. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.

C. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.

2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressure-preservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.



A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.

C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.


LBHA Addition


D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.

B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.

C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.

D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.

F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.

G. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.

1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.

H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.

1. Install bracing to comply with Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." 2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord floor

trusses at centers indicated.

I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.

J. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.

K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.

1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by Architect.

3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.


LBHA Addition



064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

LBHA Addition


SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

2. Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."


A. Product Data: For each type of product high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. PVC edge material.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches , for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material.

2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, [12 by 24 inches ][24 by 24 inches ], for each [type,] pattern and surface finish, with one sample applied to core material.

3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


LBHA Addition



A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

C. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS

A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide [labels] [and] [certificates] from certification program indicating that woodwork[, including installation,] complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.


LBHA Addition


D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturers to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Wilsonart b. Formica

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS. 3. Edges: Grade VGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Match Architect's sample.

2.3 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, [Grade M-2][Grade M-2-Exterior Glue]. 2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.


LBHA Addition


2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch , five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081][BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112].

E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; [metal][plastic][metal, two-pin type with shelf hold-down clip].

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

G. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive [or adhesive specified above for faces].

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.


LBHA Addition


C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches .

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.


LBHA Addition



071700 BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

LBHA Addition


SECTION 071700 - BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bentonite waterproofing.


1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating and backfilling. 2. Section 315000 "Excavation Support and Protection" for permanent below-grade support

systems that receive blind-side waterproofing.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include installation details for waterproofing, penetrations, and interface with other work.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of waterproofing material.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit bentonite waterproofing to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Do not apply waterproofing materials to surfaces where ice or frost is visible. Do not apply bentonite waterproofing materials in areas with standing water.

2. Do not place bentonite clay products in panel or composite form on damp surfaces unless such practice is approved in writing by manufacturer.


LBHA Addition


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GEOTEXTILE/BENTONITE SHEETS

A. Regular Geotextile/Bentonite Sheet: Minimum of 1.0 lb/sq. ft. of bentonite clay granules between two layers of polypropylene geotextile fabric, one woven and one nonwoven, needle punched and heat fused together.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. CETCO, Product: Voltext DS

2. Grab Tensile Strength: 95 lbf according to ASTM D 4632. 3. Puncture Resistance: 100 lbf according to ASTM D 4833.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Per manufacturer's requirements.

B. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich.

C. Tapes: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended waterproof tape for joints between sheets, membranes, or panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate preparations and other conditions affecting performance of bentonite waterproofing.

B. Examine bentonite materials before installation. Reject materials that have been prematurely exposed to moisture.

C. Verify that substrate is complete and that work that will penetrate waterproofing is complete and rigidly installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Formed Concrete Surfaces: Remove fins and projections. Fill voids, rock pockets, form-tie holes, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cement grout patching material according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Remove debris, standing water, oily substances, mud, and similar substances that could impair the bonding ability of concrete or the effectiveness of


LBHA Addition


waterproofing. Fill voids, cracks greater than 1/8 inch , honeycomb areas, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cement grout patching material according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Excavation Support and Protection System: If water is seeping, use plastic protection sheets or other suitable means to prevent wetting the bentonite waterproofing. Fill minor gaps and spaces 1/8 inch wide or wider with wood, metal, concrete, or other appropriate filling material. Cover or fill large voids and crevices with cement mortar according to manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Prepare substrates, voids, cracks, and cavities; and install waterproofing and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Before installing, verify the correct side of waterproofing that shall face substrate surface. 2. Prime concrete substrates. Primer may be omitted on concrete surfaces that comply with

manufacturer's written requirements for dryness, surface texture, and freedom from imperfections.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wetting before and during subsequent construction operations. Repair punctures, tears, and cuts.

3.4 GEOTEXTILE/BENTONITE SHEET INSTALLATION

A. Install a continuous layer of waterproofing sheets directly against surface to be waterproofed. Lap ends and edges a minimum of 4 inches on horizontal and vertical substrates unless otherwise indicated. Stagger end joints between sheets a minimum of 24 inches . Fasten seams by stapling to adjacent sheet or nailing to substrate.

B. Below Structural Slabs-on-Grade: Place waterproofing sheets on compacted substrate with ends and edges lapped and stapled.

1. Install a layer of waterproofing sheets under footings, grade beams, and pile caps; or continue waterproofing through key joints between footings and foundation walls, and extend a minimum of 8 inches up or beyond perimeter slab forms.

C. Concrete Walls: Starting at bottom of wall, apply waterproofing sheets horizontally against wall. Secure with masonry fasteners spaced according to manufacturer's written instructions. Extend to bottom of footing, grade beam, or wall, and secure.

1. Termination at Grade: Extend waterproofing sheets to within 12 inches of finish grade unless otherwise indicated. Secure top edge with termination bar. Apply sealant to top edge of termination bar.

2. Termination at Grade: Fasten top edge of waterproofing sheets to wall and protect top edge with sheet metal counterflashing. Cover waterproofing with a lapped course of plastic protection sheets if backfilling does not proceed immediately.

3.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap


LBHA Addition


edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.


072100 THERMAL INSULATION LBHA Addition


SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Molded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 2. Glass-fiber blanket.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing installed directly over wood or steel framing.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.




A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOLDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Molded Polystyrene Board, Type I <Insert drawing designation>: ASTM C 578, Type I, 10-psi minimum compressive strength.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. ACH Foam Technologies, Inc. b. Atlas EPS; a Division of Atlas Roofing Corporation. c. DiversiFoam Products.



d. Insulfoam-a division of Carlisle Construction Materials Inc. e. Plymouth Foam, Inc.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde.

2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.

B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced (or as shown on plans) ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

C. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced (where shown on plans) ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.



B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


072500 WEATHER BARRIERS LBHA Addition


SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 2. Section 072713 "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers" for sheet air barrier applied over

wall sheathing.



1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES

A. Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier sheet, self-adhesive type.

2.2 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)

A. Air Barrier Sheet, Self-Adhered: 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot, maximum, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E2178. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 10 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method). 3. Ultraviolet and Weather Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for maximum of

150 days weather exposure. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed

index of 450 or less (Class A), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Seam and Perimter Tape: As recommended by sheet manufacturer.



6. Products: a. Henry Company, Blueskin VP160. b. Henry Blueskin PE 200 HT (Behind Metal Copings) c. Fortifiber Building Systems Group, Weathersmart Commercial.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Henry HE571 Blueskin Adhesive

B. Or Approved.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. Primers, Cleaners, and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application, and compatible with adjacent materials.

B. Products: 1. Henry HE925 BES Sealant 2. Or Approved.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, except slip resistance requirement is waived is not installed on roof. 1. Products:

a. Henry HE200AM Metal Clad Weather Barrier. b. Henry Blueskin TWF. c. Or Approved.

2. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.

C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.



3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing

flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure

that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.


073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES LBHA Addition


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 4. Ridge vents.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Other Project Manual Specification Sections may apply to work of this Section.

1. Review other Sections for requirements related to work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit materials in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01; Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Product Data: For each product indicated. C. Samples:

1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Ridge and hip cap shingles. 3. Ridge vent.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting

agency.

a. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class ‘A’ for application and roof slopes indicated.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period.

1. Material Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated,

with first five (5) years non-prorated. 2. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor five (5) years

from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one (1) of the products

specified. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Multitab-Strip Asphalt Shingles:

1. Glass-fiber reinforced. 2. Mineral-granule surfaced. 3. Self-sealing.

a. Products:

i. CertainTeed Corporation.

aa. Landmark-Special. bb. Color: Black.

ii. Or approved.

b. Tab Arrangement: Three-tab, regularly spaced.

B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felts: 15 # asphalt-saturated organic felts, non-perforated. 2.4 RIDGE VENTS

A. Rigid Ridge Vent:

1. Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene. 2. Other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with external deflector baffles.

a. Use under ridge shingles.

3. Products:

a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent II. b. Or approved.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails:



1. Hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails. 2. Sharp-pointed. 3. Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter flat head. 4. Sufficient length to penetrate:

a. 3/4-inch into solid wood decking. b. Extend at least 1/8-inch through plywood sheathing.

i. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same

metal as flashing.

C. Felt Underlayment Nails:

1. Hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps. 2. 1-inch minimum diameter.

2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 07; Section 07 62 01 "Stainless Steel Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" or Division 07; Section 07 62 02 "Galvanized Steel Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

1. Sheet Metal: Pre-painted, metallic-coated steel.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to:

1. Design. 2. Dimensions. 3. Metal. 4. Other characteristics of item.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses.

1. Lap sides a minimum of two (2) inches over underlying course. 2. Lap ends a minimum of four (4) inches. 3. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. 4. Fasten with roofing nails.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck.

1. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if

applicable. 2. Install at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. 3. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. 4. Lap ends not less than six (6) inches staggered 24 inches between courses. 5. Roll laps with roller. 6. Cover underlayment within seven (7) days.

3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION



A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07; Section 07 62 01 "Stainless Steel Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" or Division 07; Section 07 62 02, "Galvanized Steel Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt

Roofing Manual". 2. Install asphalt shingles according to recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. Install asphalt shingles according to:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual". 3. Asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing

Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least seven (7) inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4-inch over fascia at eaves and rakes.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof

deck per Manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four (4) roofing nails located according to Manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Closed-Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one (1) side of valley 12 inches beyond center of valley.

1. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. 2. Fasten with extra nail in upper end of shingle. 3. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line

two (2) inches short of valley centerline. 4. Trim upper concealed corners of cut-back shingle strips.

a. Do not nail asphalt shingles within six (6) inches of valley center. b. Set trimmed, concealed-corner asphalt shingles in a 3-inch-wide bed of asphalt

roofing cement.

F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to Manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle

exposure.

1. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. 2. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning.



B. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, prod-ucts which have been:

1. Soiled. 2. Discolored. 3. Damaged by Work of this section.

3.5 FINAL SITE CLEANING

A. Do not burn waste materials. B. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. C. Do not discharge into drainage systems:

1. Volatile materials. 2. Harmful materials. 3. Dangerous materials.

D. Remove waste materials from Project site upon work completion or sooner and dispose of

lawfully. END OF SECTION 07 31 00

074113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

LBHA Addition


SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes standing-seam metal roof panels.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.

2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches .

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.


LBHA Addition



A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling.

B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.

E. Copper Panels: Wear gloves when handling to prevent fingerprints and soiling of surface.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.


LBHA Addition


B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: [35] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURER

A. Bruce & Dana, Inc. of Salem, 503-364-5274

B. Or approved substitution.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Profile Configuration – 1 inch vertical standing seam “SNAP-LOCK”;measurement of seam height to be made using the underlap side of panel. Vertical ribs to be 12” o.c.

B. Panel Lengths – Where physically possible and/or practical, panels are to be full length, ridge to eave.

C. Panel Composition – 1. Base Metal

a. Hot-dipped galvanized steel conforming to ASTM-653, Grade C, with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 PSI and 24 asg.

2. Protective coating to be G-90 galvanization 3. Exterior Finish – “Premium PVDF”

a. Poly-vinylidene Fluoride (PVF2); 0.8 mil “Premium PVDF”,applied over 0.2 mil baked-on polyester primer, for a minimum total of 1.0 full mil.

b. Color – to be selected from manufacturer’s selection of colors. 4. Interior Finish (underside)

a. Shall consist of a 0.15-mil polyester primer and 0.35 mil of off-white backer.

D. Panel Fasteners – When applied directly to sheathing, 1 inch hi-tensile, double threaded, sealed drywall screws will be used for the roofing panel attachment through the screwing clima-flange. Other applications – follow manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Flashing Fasteners – Self-drilling screws of sufficient length to properly secure flashings. Use types and number to match manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Roof Flashings

1) shall be flashed using manufacturer’s recommended materials.

2) Metal flashings will be of same finish, thickness and matching color, unless otherwise noted.


LBHA Addition


G. Sealant – Caulking gun dispense “FLEXO SEAL” by AC Products, La Jolla, CA. NO PERFORMED CLOSURES OR TAPES to be used on this project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Bidder is to inspect project sight to confirm that no problems are visible. That the surface is in such a condition as to allow an installation of the quality that is acceptable to the Manufacturer and the Architect. Any problems shall be brought to an Architect’s Representative, prior to installation of the roofing panels.

B. Minimum roof pitch will be at least a 1/12.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install, per submitted shop drawings, in such a manner as to meet Manufacturer’s specification and/or Architect’s requirements.

B. Remove strippable coating AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. Do not allow stripping to remain on the panel in extreme cold, heat or long exposure to sunlight.

C. Caulk and fasten in such a manner as to maintain a complete weather tight system. Once project is complete, no sealant should be visible.

D. DO NOT USE ANY TOOL TO CUT PANEL THAT WILL BURN METAL OR USES HEAT TO CUT – i.e. circular saw or torch.

3.3 FASTENING

A. Wood Decks 1. Roofing decking shall be a minimum of 5/8” plywood or firring. 2. Fasteners shall be a minimum 1” coated bugle head screw, placed every 16” o.c. 3. On exposed soffits, fasteners shall be 9/16” coated bugle head screw, placed every 9” or

10” o.c.

B. Wood Purlins 1. 2’ Center spacing; (2) – 1” bugle head screws placed every purlin. 2. 16” Center spacing; (1) – 1” bugle head screw placed every purlin. Slip Sheet: Apply slip

sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.


LBHA Addition



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing.

B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074113.16

074646 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING LBHA Addition


SECTION 074646 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fiber-cement siding and soffit.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for weather-resistive barriers.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use.

B. Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: James Hardie

B. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch .

D. Horizontal Pattern: Boards 6-1/4 to 6-1/2 inches wide in plain style.

1. Texture: Wood grain.

2.3 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT

A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: James Hardie

B. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch .

C. Pattern: 24-inch- wide sheets with wood-grain texture.

D. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit [unless otherwise indicated].



2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.

B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated:

1. Door and window casings. 2. Fasciae. 3. Moldings and trim.

C. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Factory-prime coating.

D. Fasteners:

1. For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners.

E. Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum, hat-channel shape, with perforations; 2 inches wide and not less than 96 inches long.

1. Net-Free Area: 6 sq. in./linear ft. . 2. Finish: Mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c.



B. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.


A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.


077200 SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM

LBHA Addition


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pre-finished galvanized steel flashing and trim. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. Review other Sections for requirements related to work of this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. A446, Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality.

2. A525, Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements.

B. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors Nation Association, Inc.,

“Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit shop drawings detailing all flashing and trim components.

1. Indicate:

a. Joint locations. b. Spacing and type of fasteners. c. Details that allow for expansion / contraction.

C. Submit fabricator and installer qualifications. D. Submit standard color samples.


A. Qualifications of fabricator: Minimum of ten (10) years experience on equivalent projects. B. Installer qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years experience on equivalent projects.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Pre-finished steel sheet: 1. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty on finish coating.

a. Minimum 30 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


LBHA Addition


2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Pre-finished steel sheets:

1. BHP Steel Building Products. 2. Taylor Metal Products. 3. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Pre-finished steel sheets for custom trim:

1. Galvanized steel per ASTM A446 and A525, or ASTM A792 and A792-A250. 2. Finish: Kynar 500 baked on finish (full 70 % resins) with a total 1.0 mil. dry film

thickness. 2. Gauge: 24. 3. Fasteners: Color matched to pre-finished metal..

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrications. B. Produce lines / edges sharp and true. C. Surfaces shall be free of waves and buckles. D. Hem free edges to produce rigidity. E. Make proper allowances for:

1. Thermal movement of sheet metal. 2. Movement between sheet metal and other building elements.

F. Fabricate materials for runs in longest practical lengths, unless other lengths are shown.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that work to receive sheet metal is in condition to receive sheet metal.

1. All materials that are to receive sheet metal work should be:

a. Securely anchored. b. Correctly located. c. In proper alignment.

B. Assure that painting required on prior work is completed and has dried. C. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory.

1. Beginning work will be interpreted as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within

any particular area. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials to SMACNA best practices. B. Use concealed fastenings wherever possible.



LBHA Addition


A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. B. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed,

products which have been:







079200 JOINT SEALANTS LBHA Addition



A. Exterior joint sealants. B. Joint backing materials. C. Interior sealants.






B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each joint sealer product required.

1. Include instructions for:

a. Joint preparation. b. Primer (if required). c. Recommended back-up material.

C. Color Samples: Submit manufacturer’s full range of colors available for each product.

1. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard finish colors by one (1) or more of

the following dependent on Conditions of the Contract:

a. Architect b. Designer c. Owner. d. Owner’s Representative.


A. Installer’s Qualifications: Engage installers with minimum five (5) years experience who have completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project.

B. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

C. Prior to installation of joint sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates of each type encountered.

1. Determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required.

a. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during actual installation in accordance with Field Quality Control requirements in this section.

b. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the Work.



1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers bearing:

1. Date of manufacture. 2. Brand name of Manufacturer.

B. Store packaged material:

1. In a dry location. 2. At temperatures between 40° and 90° F.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. Ambient and substrate temperature conditions are:

a. Outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. b. Below 40° F.

2. Joint substrates are wet due to:

a. Rain. b. Condensation. c. Other causes.

B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealant when joint widths

are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until

contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warrant exterior sealant joints jointly and severally by the sealant manufacturer, sealant Installer and General Contractor against defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion.

1. Warranty shall include the following for the full warranty period:

a. Adhesive and cohesive failure of joints. b. Chalking or visible color change on surfaces of cured sealant.

2. Warranty shall stipulate that sealant shall not cause the porous substrates to discolor or change their appearance due to fluid migration for the full warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with:

1. One another. 2. Joint substrates under conditions of service and application.



a. As demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Exterior Sealant: Urethane (one part).

1. Bostix Chem-calk 900. 2. Sikaflex-1a. 3. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP1. 4. Tremco Dymonic. 5. Or approved.

a. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard finish colors by one (1) or

more of the following dependent on Conditions of the Contract:

i. Architect ii. Designer iii. Owner. iv. Owner’s Representative.

C. Interior Sealant: Acrylic-Latex.

1. Bostix Chem-calk 600. 2. Pecora AC20. 3. General Electric 1300. 4. Or approved.

a. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s standard finish colors by one (1) or

more of the following dependent on Conditions of the Contract:

i. Architect ii. Designer iii. Owner. iv. Owner’s Representative.

D. Toilet Room Sealant: Mildew resistant type silicone.

1. Dow Corning “786 Mildew Resistant Silicone”. 2. General Electric “SCS1702”. 3. Pecora Corporation “898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant”. 4. Or approved one (1) part mildew resistant silicone sealant complying with

requirements of ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.

a. Color: White.

E. Back-up filler (Backer Rod): Polyethylene foam round sealant backer.

1. Dow “Ethaform SB” rod. 2. PRC “Minicel”. 3. Nomaform “Green-Rod”. 4. Or approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of:



1. Joint configuration. 2. Installation tolerances. 3. Other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.

a. Do not proceed with joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. b. Proceeding with work without objection to unsatisfactory or incomplete

surfaces, structures or substrates constitutes acceptance. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Joints: Clean joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:

1. Edges of precast concrete and face brick shall be:

a. Sound. b. Smooth. c. Clean. d. Dry.

2. Clean joint surfaces free from:

a. Dirt. b. Dust. c. Other contaminants that may affect adhesion such as:

i. Form release agents. ii. Retarders. iii. Sealers.

3. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces. 4. Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other

means which:

a. Are not harmful to substrates. b. Leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Jointing Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer

based on:

1. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing. 2. Prior experience.

a. Apply primer undiluted in uniform coating over surface. b. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond. c. Do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Apply masking tape around joints where required to:

1. Prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be stained

or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.

2. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturer’s printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

1. Except where more stringent requirements apply.

B. Installation Standards: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint

sealants as indicated as applicable to:

1. Materials. 2. Applications. 3. Conditions.

C. Installation of Sealant Backings:

1. Install backer rods in all butt type joints receiving sealant where depth of joint exceeds

manufacturer’s recommendations.

a. Install joint filler using a blunt tool or plain-faced roller. b. Do not puncture, stretch, or twist joint fillers.

2. Do not leave gap between ends of joint fillers.

a. Remove joint fillers that become wet prior to sealant application. b. Replace with dry material.

3. Generally, install joint fillers to a depth of 1/4- inch below surface of joint.

a. Where depth of joint is not sufficient to require joint filler, install bond breaker

tape to cover full width and length of joint cavity to prevent three-sided adhesion.

D. Joint Width: Width-to-depth ratio of sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

1. Do not exceed a depth of 1/2- inch when joint is 1/2- inch wide. 2. Joints exceeding 1/2- inch in width shall not exceed 1/4- inch in depth.

E. Installation of Sealants: Apply sealant over backing to uniform thickness in continuous

beads.

1. Fill all joints and voids solid.

a. Superficial pointing with skim bead will not be accepted. b. Use nozzle of proper size to completely fill the joints.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time

skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to:

1. Form smooth, uniform beads, free of air pockets. 2. Ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 3. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.

a. Provide concave joint configuration, unless otherwise indicated. b. Do not use tooling agents which:

i. Discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.



ii. Are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

G. Clean-Up: Upon completion:

1. Remove and dispose of masking materials. 2. Remove all excess sealing materials. 3. Clean adjacent surfaces of all soil and stain resulting from sealing operations.

3.4 FIELD-ADHESION TESTING

A. Perform field test of joint sealant in accordance with test recommended in ASTM C1193.

1. Method described is similar to method described in less detail in:

a. AAMA’s “Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 13”. b. SWRI’s “Sealants: The Professionals’ Guide.”

B. Perform two (2) tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. C. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated

requirements will be considered satisfactory.

1. Remove sealants that fail to:

a. Adhere to joint substrates during testing. b. Comply with other requirements.

2. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

C. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have been:







081100 KNOCKDOWN METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

LBHA Addition



A. Section Includes: This Section specifies knocked down, site assembled, prefinished metal, non-fire-rated and fire-rated frames for:

1. Doors. 2. Sidelights. 3. Borrowed Lights. 4. Transoms.






B. Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:

1. Manufacturer's product data.

a. Include Manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product sheet.

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows:

1. Frame elevations. 2. Details of frame anchorage. 3. Details of reinforcements. 4. Rough opening requirements. 5. Locations of Hardware Embosses. 6. Finishes.

D. Samples: Submit as follows:

1. Preliminary finish options for selection. (Physical Samples, not digital) 2. Frame samples illustrating each finish specified.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit Manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official for Owner's acceptance. 1. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under other

Contract Documents.

a. Warranty Term: Minimum of five (5) years, to commence on date of Substantial Completion.


LBHA Addition


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. Timely Industries 10241 Norris Avenue Pacoima, CA 91331-2218 Toll free: 800-247-6242 Fax: 818-492-3530 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.timelyframes.com

2.2 FRAMES:

A. Frame Material:

1. Electro-galvanized, cold-rolled steel to ASTM A879.

B. Frame Throat Opening: As indicated on Drawings. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Frame Profile:

1. "S" Series: Standard 0.9 mm (20 gauge) thick, COLOR: BLACK

E. Side Light Frame: 1.2 mm (18 gauge). F. Frame Casings:

1. TA-8 Standard Steel CAsing.

a. Material: Cold-rolled steel to ASTM A366.

2. Cut, notch and fabricate frames at Manufacturer's facility.

a. For fire-rated and exterior openings, provide kerf at stop for installation of smoke gasket or

weatherstrip.

3. Provide minimum 14 gauge hinge reinforcement plate tapped for machine screws supplied with hinges.

a. Mechanically attach hinge plate to hinge emboss on frame.

4. Casing Clips: Fabricate frames with factory applied, heat treated clips to prevent deflection in the clip

upon application or removal of casing.

a. Attachment clips may not be of same material as frame. 5. Provide notches and tabs or stops (or both) for positive alignment of frame parts at all corners. 6. Notch mullions to provide tight joints. 7. Provide Manufacturer's standard mullion brackets for positive connection of frame and mullion parts. 8. Provide Manufacturer's standard steel glass stop.

a. Factory cut to exact length.

9. Provide a hole for installation screw within two (2) inches of each end of stop piece at fire-rated glazed

openings. 10. Provide insert channel full width of light for sidelight and borrowed light frames installed on finish floor.

a. Provide full width head channel for ceiling height units.

11. Provide fixed type transom bars with same profiles as jamb and head. 12. Prepare frames for ASA 4 7/8 inch (124 mm) strikes, where required.


LBHA Addition


a. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) depth of threads in factory tapped screw holes.

13. Provide TA-46 smoke gasket on all prefinished, CK series frames.

a. Install with factory mitered corners to provide a seal.

14. Provide corner alignment clips.

G. Finishes:

1. Standard Color(s): Alumatone (SC108).


A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions prior to door frame installation.

B. Inform Architect of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. C. Proceed with installation only after:

1. Unacceptable conditions have been remedied. 2. Receipt of written approval from Architect.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate frame work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

1. Install frame in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install frame plumb and level. 3. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects. 4. Progress Cleaning.


A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. B. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which

have been:





D. Remove waste materials from Project site upon work completion or sooner and dispose of lawfully.

END OF SECTION 08 11 00

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

LBHA Addition



A. Hollow metal doors. B. Hollow metal doorframe and sidelights.





A. Submit product data in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01; Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”.


A. Comply with following reference standards:

1. ANSI A115, Standard Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. 2. SDI 100-83, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver doors in manufacturer’s original unopened protective material or container, individually wrapped.

B. Store and handle doors in a manner to prevent soiling or damage. 1.6 VERIFICATION

A. Verify existing rough opening sizes prior to ordering doors and frames. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ceco. B. Curries. C. Republic. D. Steelcraft. E. Or approved.

2.2. MATERIALS

A. Steel:

1. Sheet steel:


LBHA Addition


a. Commercial quality. b. Cold rolled stretcher leveled. c. Full pickled by treatment at mill. d. Free from:

i. Scale. ii. Warp. iii. Buckles.

e. Meet additional requirements of ASTM A366.

2. Hardware reinforcement steel: Per ASTM A36.

B. Fastenings:

1. For glass stops: Cadmium plated screws with oval head, sheet metal threads. 2. For frame mounting to concrete:

a. Rawl “Doubles” where fastening is within 1-3/4” of edge of concrete. b. Phillips “Red Head” type elsewhere or approved equal. c. 3/8” diameter bolts with 2” minimum penetration into concrete.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Door: 1-3/4” thick flush type, hollow metal doors of size and style indicated on the Drawings.

1. Face Sheets: 18 gauge. 2. Reinforcement: Lock and hinge rails reinforced with 14 gauge minimum channels

and may have seam finished edges.

a. Top and bottom of door shall have 16 gauge minimum steel closure channels. b. Hardware reinforcement shall be:

i. 12 gauge minimum for closer. ii. 14 gauge minimum for exit devices.

3. Insulation: Full thickness polystyrene. 4. Glass stop: Standard type.

B. Frame: 16 gauge steel.

1. Fully welded mitered corners.

a. Ground smooth to provide invisible joint.

i. Preparation:

aa. Dimple punch for flat head bolt fasteners. bb. Frames to be mortised, reinforced and drilled and tapped for all

mortise finish hardware per ANSI standards. cc. Frames to be reinforced for surface mounted hardware. dd. Steel plates and mortising boxes are to be welded to all hinge

and lock reinforcements.

C. Glass stops: Dimple for countersinking screws.


LBHA Addition


1. Fit glass stops with mitered corners, without joint in any run. 2. Locate screws symmetrically, on interior side of exterior doors and sidelight.

D. Primer: Manufacturer’s standard rust-inhibitive primer capable of passing both:

1. 120 hour salt spray test of ASTM B117. 2. 250 hour humidity test of ASTM D1735.

a. Frames to be thoroughly degreased and cleaned of all imperfections before

painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal frames in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, plumb and with head level.

B. Shim all hollow metal frames with steel shims.

1. Place shims to give full bearing under connectors. 2. Select shim size to:

a. Prevent warping of frame. b. Make permanently rigid installation.

3. Shims concealed by minimum of 1/2” covering by abutting finish.

C. Fill and finish over flat head bolt anchors.

a. CLEANING AND REPAIRING









081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS LBHA Addition



A. Rated and Non-rated wood doors. B. Glass stops.






B. Shop Drawings: Indicate:

1. Location. 2. Elevation of each type of door. 3. Size. 4. Bevel. 5. Undercut. 6. Swing.

a. Hand of each door.

7. Fire ratings. 8. Machining.

a. Holes. b. Cutouts. c. Mortises.

9. Other pertinent data.

C. Submit two (2) samples of stain and finish on the specified veneer for Architectural approval

prior to finishing. D. Submit manufacturer’s specification literature to assure product compliance.


A. Meet or exceed WDMA IS-1A, current edition. B. Positive pressure labeled fire doors: Listed in accordance with Warnock Hersey (ITS)

UL10C, NFPA 252. C. Installed Door Assembly: Fire-rated doors to conform to NFPA 80.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver doors in manufacturer’s original unopened protective material or container, individually wrapped.

B. Store and handle doors in a manner to prevent soiling or damage.



1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Submit manufacturer’s warranty that meets the standard door guarantee of the Wood Door Manufacturers Association.


A. BJ Door. B. Lynden Door, Inc. C. Vancouver Door Co., Inc. D. Western Oregon Door. E. VT Industries, Inc., Architectural Door. F. Or approved

2.2 DOOR TYPES

A. Interior doors: See Door Schedule(s) in Plans.

1. Interior doors: 1 3/4” thick. 2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Particleboard-Core Doors: ANSI A208.1 made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

B. Non-rated and 20-minute rated:

1. Particleboard Core. 2. Minimum 1 3/8” stiles. 3. Stiles and rails securely bonded to the core with adhesive.

a. Sand as a complete assembly prior to the application of the face veneers.

C. 45-, 60- and 90-minute fire-rated:

1. Mineral core per manufacturer’s listing. 2. Fabricate in accordance with UL or Warnock Hershey (ITS) I listings. 3. Mineral core fire doors require a minimum five (5) inch top rail for closer

reinforcement. 4. Mineral core fire doors designated with exit device hardware require minimum 5”x17”

fire-retardant blocking on both hinge and lock stiles for mounting reinforcement.

D. All doors assembled with PVA Type I adhesive, shall contain no urea-formaldehyde. E. Face all doors with matching birch veneer, both sides. F. Plastic Laminate Faced Doors:

1. Door Face: High-pressure decorative laminates comply with NEMA LD 3, Grade

HGS.

a. Stiles: Plastic-laminate matching faces.

i. Apply before face.



2. The following to be selected from laminate manufacturer’s full range of products by

one (1) or more of the following dependent on Conditions of the Contract:


i. Colors. ii. Patterns. iii. Finishes

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory machine doors for finish hardware.

1. Include:

a. Face holes for mortise and exit devices. b. Thru boltholes for lever design cylindrical locks.

B. Factory cut and trim vision openings.

1. Non-rated and 20-minute vision stop: Metal vision frame. 2. 45-, 60- and 90-minute vision stop: Metal vision frame (approved and listed frame)

per manufacturer’s standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND SITE CONDITIONS

A. All factory finished doors to be individually poly-bagged for protection. B. Deliver, store, protect and handle doors under provisions of:

1. WDMA. 2. Manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Inspect doors for damage prior to accepting job site delivery. D. Do not store doors in areas subject to direct sunlight. E. HVAC systems shall be operating and balanced prior to the delivery and storage of doors.

1. Relative humidity of not less than 20% nor greater than 55%.

F. Store all doors in horizontal flat position prior to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with:

1. ANSI. 2. WDMA IS-1A. 3. NFPA 80.

B. Ensure all frames and doors are properly installed level and plumb.



C. Adjust operation of door for smooth and balanced movement. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING









084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

LBHA Addition



A. Aluminum entrance doors and hardware. B. Aluminum storefront fixed windows.




1. Review other Sections for requirements related to work of this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Air infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283.

1. Infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 CFM per square foot of fixed area when tested at 6.24 psf.

B. Water infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331.

1. No water penetration at a test pressure of 8 psf.

C. Structural performance shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E330 and based on:

1. Maximum deflection of 1/175 of the span. 2. Allowable stress with a safety factor of 1.65.

a. The system shall perform to these criteria under a wind load of 80 mph.

D. System shall exceed maximum seismic lateral displacement requirements specified in the

Oregon Structural Specialty Code, current edition. E. Thermal performance: Tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-88.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit materials in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01; Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures” prior to fabrication.

B. Shop drawings:

1. Show opening sizes with field verified dimensions. 2. Indicate the following items required to attach frame section to opening.

a. Location. b. Spacing. c. Type of fasteners.

i. Conform to performance requirements indicated under quality assurance.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard ten (10) year warranty.


LBHA Addition



A. Kawneer Company, Inc. B. U.S Aluminum Corporation. C. Or approved.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fixed window and door sidelight frame:

1. Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper (ASTM B221 alloy T5 temper), thermally broken by a two-part chemically cured high density polyurethane.

2. Fasteners shall be one (1) of the following in accordance with ASTM A164 where exposed:

a. Aluminum. b. Stainless Steel. c. Zinc Plated Steel.

3. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel.

a. Steel must be properly insulated from the aluminum.

4. Glazing gaskets shall be E.P.D.M. elastomeric extrusions.

B. Doors:

1. Extruded architectural aluminum shall be 6063-T5 alloy and temper.

a. Major portions of all door sections, except glazing beads, shall be nominal

0.188 inch.

2. Fastening devices shall be:

a. Aluminum. b. Stainless Steel. c. Other non-corrosive materials.

i. Fastening devices include, but are not limited to:

aa. Screws. bb. Nuts. cc. Washers. dd. Bolts. ee. Rivets. ff. Other fastening devices.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Storefront framing is detailed based on:

1. U.S. Aluminum Series FT451 “Thermal Flush Front Glazing System”. 2. Doors to accommodate 1” insulated glass.


LBHA Addition


a. The framing system shall provide for a flush glazing appearance.

i. No projecting stops.

aa. Vertical and horizontal framing members shall have a nominal width of 2”.

bb. Overall depth of system shall be 4 1/2”.

b. Entrance framing members shall be compatible with glass framing in appearance.

i. Provide for internal drainage of infiltrated water into an extruded

aluminum subsill channel where it is drained to the exterior through weep slots.

B. Entrance doors are detailed as:

1. U.S. Aluminum Series 800 Durafront offset hung door with 9 1/2” bottom rail. 2. Door(s) to accommodate 1” glass.

a. Door stiles and rails shall be:

i. Tubular sections. ii. Accurately joined at corners with heavy concealed reinforcement

brackets secured with bolts and screws. iii. MIG welded. iv. Doors shall have snap-in stops with bulb glazing gasket both sides of

glass.

3. No exposed screws shall be permitted. 4. Doors shall have the following manufacturer’s standard hardware.

a. Barrier free push / pull. b. 1 1/2 pair butt hinges per leaf. c. Threshold (4” x 1/2”) for single acting door. d. Surface mounted closer (meet barrier free requirement). e. Weather-stripped door stops at frame jambs and header. f. Concealed weatherstrip insert at bottom. g. Cylinder: Furnished in Division 08; Section 08 71 00, “Door Hardware”.

2.4 FINISH

A. Clear anodized. B. All exposed framing surfaces shall be free of:

1. Scratches. 2. Other blemishes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Storefront: Framing shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details. B. Shall be level, square, plumb and in alignment with other Work in accordance with:


LBHA Addition


1. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Approved shop drawings.

a. All joints between framing and the building structure shall be sealed in order to

secure a watertight installation.

C. Doors: Install doors and hardware in proper alignment to attain normal operation. 3.2 CLEANING

A. Leave installation free of:

1. Scratches. 2. Dirt. 3. Excess sealant. 4. Other blemishes.

B. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. C. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed,








085313 VINYL WINDOWS LBHA Addition


SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl-framed windows.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for vinyl windows.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of vinyl window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements.



b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Jeld-Wen, Inc. 2. Milgard Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Pella Corporation. 4. Quaker Construction Products, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: LC. 2. Minimum Performance Grade: 25.

C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of [0.40][0.30][0.27]<Insert value>.

2.3 VINYL WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings:

1. Fixed – Per Drawings.

2. Sliding – Per Drawings.

B. Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.



1. Finish: Integral color, white. 2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame. 3. Style: To match existing building windows as close as possible.

C. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.

1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear.

2. Lites: Per Drawings. 3. Low-E Coating.

D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.

E. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.

C. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.

D. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant reinforcement.

E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

B. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.


087111 DOOR HARDWARE LBHA Addition



A. Finish hardware for doors. Generic hardware items for each door, Hardware is to be provided on a design/build basis.





A. Where manufacturer’s product number is listed in this section, furnish that manufacturer’s products or equal quality products of manufacturers listed under Part 2, Products.

B. Hardware furnished only by direct dealer authorized by manufacturer of each item specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit materials in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and and Division 01; Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Furnish door manufacturers with correct and complete templates of items connected with work of this section.

C. Hardware schedule: Due as soon as practical after award of Contract, but not later than 15 days from that date.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. Deliver hardware to job in time for inspection before installing. B. Package separately for each location. Mark and number each package to indicate location

for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS (*denotes manufacturer specified in Hardware Schedule) (Use one (1) of the

manufacturers listed in each category or approved)

A. Hinges:

1. Lawrence. 2. Hager*. 3. McKinney. 4. Stanley.

B. Latchset and locksets:

1. Schlage* (or as preferred by owner). 2. See Appendix “A”, Holiday Inn Express® Standards Manual, current edition, for

requirements for guest room entry doors.



3. Guestroom entry doors must have as a minimum, an approved card key entry electronic lock with lever handle for hotel / motel usage (see Holiday Inn Express® Standards Manual, current edition, for additional information).

C. Surface door closers:

1. LCN* (or as preferred by owner).

D. Exit devices:

1. Von Duprin* (or as preferred by owner).

E. Cylinders:

1. Schlage* (or as preferred by owner).

F. Kickplates:

1. Cipco. 2. Hager*. 3. Tice. 4. Quality.

G. Door stops:

1. Builders Brass Works. 2. Glynn-Johnson. 3. Hager*. 4. Ives. 5. Quality.

H. Silencers:

1. Builders Brass Works. 2. Glynn-Johnson. 3. Hager*. 4. Ives.

I. Smoke Seal:

1. Hager*. 2. Pemko. 3. Reece. 4. Ultra.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Hinges:

1. Sizes: 4 1/2” x 4 l/2”. 2. Spring loaded at Guestroom doors.

B. Latchsets:

1. Backset: 2 3/4”.



3. Strikes: 10-025 box strike unless otherwise noted.

C. Silencers: Provide three (3) silencers for each non-fire rated door. 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners:

1. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head screws to match finish of adjacent surfaces. 3. Where available, provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed

when door is closed. 4. Provide fasteners which are compatible with both the item fastened and the substrate.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Keying:

1. Master keying: Key all locks and cylinders to the Owner’s requirements. Furnish master keys.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Locksets: U26D finish. B. Balance of door hardware to match.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VERIFICATION

A. Verification of keying requirements: Visit Owner, explain lock functions and assist Owner in setting keying schedule. Make such modifications to specified keying schedule as Owner requires, without cost to Owner. Secure in writing from Owner approval of final keying schedule before ordering cylinders.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Have qualified hardware manufacturer’s representative inspect hardware and assist in installation and adjustment of all hardware required by work of this section, both at jobsite and subcontractor’s shops, as required by job conditions.

B. Install hardware listed in Hardware Schedule.

1. Set door hinges flush with edge surface and in a straight line. 2. Remove hardware and reinstall after finish paint work is complete for site finished

door frame surfaces.

C. Hardware mounting heights: Per ANSI A115 unless otherwise shown. 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Check and adjust operating hardware to insure proper operation. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE



Hardware is required to fit functions as outlined on room usage. Contractor to consider hardware schedule as “design / build” and submit a schedule for shop review.










088300 MIRRORS LBHA Addition


SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:

1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors. 2. [Film-backed][Laminated][Tempered] glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.


1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites.

2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.



1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.

B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details.



B. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.

1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted.


A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS

A. Tempered Clear Glass Mirrors: 1. Comply with ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for:

a. Blemish requirements in annealed float glass before silver coating is applied. b. Coating requirements. c. Other requirements not affected by tempering process.


A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.



B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.

C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Palmer Products Corporation.

D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.

2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE

A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece.

1. Bottom [and Side] Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch .

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Andscot Company, Inc. 2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3) Stylmark, Inc.

2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch .

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1) Andscot Company, Inc. 2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3) Stylmark, Inc.

3. Finish: Clear bright anodized.

B. Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel shapes with plated finish indicated.

1. Profile: As Selected from manufacturers standard options 2. Finish: As Selected from manufacturers standard options.

C. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.



D. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield, expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing finishes or primers with mirror mastic.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.

1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.

1. Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.

2. Aluminum J-Channels and Cleat: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall.

3. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

4. Install mastic as follows:

a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.



b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.


A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.

B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.

C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.

D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.


092900 GYPSUM BOARD LBHA Addition


SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Texture finishes.


1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 3. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall framing,

gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies. 4. Section 092613 "Gypsum Veneer Plastering" for gypsum base for veneer plaster and for

other components of gypsum-veneer-plaster finishes. 5. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for

ceramic tile.




A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.



4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.



2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch . 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch . 2. Long Edges: Tapered

D. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.


E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch , Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.



1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.

C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.


a. Fry Reglet Corporation.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use [setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose] compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose] compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose] compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use [setting-type, sandable topping compound or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.



2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert number> percent.

E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Hilti, Inc. b. USG Corporation.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.



B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 4. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings.



B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.



B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS LBHA Addition


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. Acoustical ceiling suspension systems. B. Acoustical ceiling panels.




1. Review other Sections for requirements related to work of this Section. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM A641, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 2. ASTM C635, Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel

Ceilings. 3. ASTM C636, Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and

Lay-in Panels.

B. Uniform Building Code:

1. UBC Standard No. 25-2, “Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings”.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit two (2) 12” x 12” samples of acoustical panel pattern and texture to Architect for review prior to ordering of materials.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Deliver five (5) percent extra stock of total acoustical panels to the Owner at Substantial Completion.

1. Obtain a signed receipt of delivery from the Owner.

B. Submit copy of receipt to the Architect per Division 01; Section 01 77 00, “Closeout

Procedures”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acoustical ceiling suspension systems:

1. Armstrong.



2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. Donn Brand, USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Or approved.

B. Acoustical ceiling panels:

1. Armstrong. 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Or approved.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Acoustical ceiling suspension systems:

1. Exposed grid:

a. Armstrong Prelude XL. b. Chicago 200 or 800. c. Donn DX. d. National ML or G. e. Roblin 1000 (RF or 4000). f. Or approved.

2. Standard components:

a. System requirements: Comply with ASTM C635. b. Structural classification: Intermediate-duty.

i. No deflection in excess of 1/360 of the span.

c. Coatings: Comply with ASTM C635. d. Wall moldings: Angle with hemmed edges. e. Hanger wire: ASTM A641, 12 gage galvanized steel wire.

3. Exposed grid framing components:

a. Main runners:

i. 1-1/2” high. ii. 15/16” exposed flange. iii. 12’-0” long. iv. 0.015” minimum thickness.

b. Cross tees:

i. 1-1/8” minimum height. ii. 15/16” exposed flange. iii. 4’-0” long. iv. 0.015” minimum thickness.

c. Coatings: White matte painted finish on:

i. Exposed runners. ii. Tees. iii. Wall moldings.



B. Acoustical ceiling panels: Factory applied washable white vinyl latex paint finish, Class A,

textured, beveled tegular lay-in panels.

1. Armstrong Cortega Second Look II. 2. Or approved.

a. Panel size and edges:

i. 24” x 48” x 3/4”. ii. Tegular edge for 15/16” grid.

b. Panel data:

i. STC 35-39. ii. Flame spread 25 or less. iii. NRC 0.50 to 0.60. iv. LR-1.

c. Acoustical Ceiling Panels - Kitchen Area:

i. Factory washable.

aa. Provide vinyl washable tiles with hold downs suitable for

commercial kitchen locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install per current IBC with applicable Amendments. B. Installation of acoustical ceiling suspension systems:

1. Grid location as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. 2. Install in accordance with:

a. Manufacturer’s instructions. b. Recommendations of Article 2, Installation of Components, in ASTM C636.

3. Install main runners at 48” o.c. with hanger wire support at not more than 48” o.c. 4. Wrap hanger wire at least 3 full turns. 5. Install cross-tees at 24” o.c. and adjacent to recessed light fixtures not supported by

main runners. 6. Provide moldings where ceilings meet walls and other vertical elements. 7. Seismic support: Install bracing per current IBC with Oregon Amendments.

B. Installation of acoustical ceiling panels:

1. Clean exposed ceiling suspension members prior to installation of ceiling panels. 2. Install ceiling panels in suspended grid system as indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust grid height as required to maintain ceiling system is level to within 1/8” in 12’. B. Remove and replace panels prior to Substantial Completion as directed by Architect that

are:



1. Improperly placed. 2. Broken. 3. Damaged.










096500 RESILIENT FLOORING LBHA Addition



A. Vinyl composition floor tile (VCT). B. Resilient linoleum sheet flooring. C. Rubber flooring. D. Sheet Vinyl flooring. E. Anti-Static tile. F. Rubber stair treads. G. Resilient flooring plank tiles. H. Heterogenous sheet flooring.





A. Comply with Recommended Work Procedures for Resilient Floor Covering of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product samples:

1. Color. 2. Style. 3. Pattern. 4. Texture.

a. Size: 2” x 2” minimum.

5. Seek approval by one (1) or more of the following as per Project requirements.

a. Architect. b. Designer. c. Owner. d. Owner’s Representative.

C. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance practices for each

flooring material at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Include:

a. Care. b. Cleaning. c. Maintenance.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - Owner to select final finishes. Use the following for bidding purposes.

B. Luxury Vinyl Plank with beveled edges.

1. Mannington Spacia Wood

a. Color: Per Finish Schedule. See Plans. b. Size: 7.25” x 48” c. Overall Thickness: 0.096” d. Wearlayer Thickness: 20mil e. Warranty: Ten (10) year Limited Commercial f. Adhesive:

i. Amtico 373 ii. Or approved.

E. Anti-Static tile: Roppe, ESD Static Control Tile, or approved.

1. Nominal size: 12” x 12”. 2. Thickness: 1/8”. 1. Color: Per Finish Schedule. See Plans. 2. Warranty: Ten (10) year limited wear. 3. Install using Roppe ROP605 two-part ESD epoxy or ROP604 single-part ESD acrylic

adhesive and in accordance with Roppe’s recommendations in order for the product warranty to be in effect.

F. Rubber stair treads and landing tiles:

1. Manufacturer:

a. Roppe. b. Or approved.

2. Color: Per Finish Schedule. See Plans. 3. Product: #94 Raised Square Design 4. Include Rubber inserts for Visually Impaired.

a. Color: W – Pebble White b. Size: 2” Strips

a. Warranty:

i. One (1) year limited warranty. ii. five (5) year Limited Wear Warranty

k. Service level: Heavy duty. l. Adhesive: Per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of:

a. Curing compounds. b. Sealers. c. Hardeners.

2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.

a. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869.

i. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-

vapor-emission rate of 3 lb. of water / 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.

i. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain:

1. Soap. 2. Wax. 3. Oil. 4. Silicone

a. Use mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. b. Do not use solvents.

D. In substrates, use trowelable leveling and patching compound to:

1. Fill cracks. 2. Holes. 3. Depressions.

E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at

least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before

installation.

1. After cleaning, examine substrates for:

a. Moisture. b. Alkaline salts. c. Carbonation.



d. Dust.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

a. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrate.

G. Notify Architect of improper substrate conditions prior to installation.

1. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install the following products in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions:

1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient linoleum sheet flooring. 3. Rubber flooring. 4. Sheet Vinyl flooring. 5. Anti-static tile. 6. Rubber stair treads.

a. Restrict traffic for 72 hours after installation.

7. Resilient flooring plank tiles. 8. Heterogenous sheet flooring.

B. Cleaning: See manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.





C. Leave all floor areas “Broom Clean” at time of Substantial Completion.






096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

LBHA Addition



A. Rubber base. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS





B. Color sample: submit three (3) samples of material brand and color samples for selection of colors.

C. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance practices for each flooring material at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Rubber base:

1. Manufacturer:

a. Flexco. b. Johnsonite. c. Burke. d. Roppe. e. Or approved.

2. 1/8” gauge. 3. Height per Plans. 4. Standard cove toe base. 5. Roll goods. 6. Color: Per Finish Schedule. See Plans. 7. Furnish with premolded outside corners.

B. Edging strips:

1. Beveled rubber or vinyl strips.

a. Manufacturer:

i. Flexco. ii. Johnsonite. iii. Burke. iv. Or approved.

C. Adhesive: As recommended by base manufacturers.

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

LBHA Addition



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written recommendations to ensure adhesion of products.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Rubber base:

1. Install per manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Apply in long lengths to walls.

a. Without joints on:

i. Walls. ii. Cabinets. iii. Kick space.

3.3 CLEANING, GENERAL

A. Remove any stains and / or adhesive from visible surfaces on floors and walls by methods recommended by material manufacturer.





C. Leave all floor areas “Broom Clean” at time of Substantial Completion.






096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING LBHA Addition


SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes [vinyl] [and] [rubber] sheet flooring.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each different color and pattern of resilient sheet flooring required.

1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than [9 inches ] long, of each color required.

D. Welded-Seam Samples: For seamless-installation technique indicated and for each resilient sheet flooring product, color, and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of [6-by-9-inch ] Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient sheet flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of resilient sheet flooring to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than [10 linear feet ] for every [500 linear feet ] or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store resilient sheet flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F . Store rolls upright.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [70 deg F ] or more than [85 deg F ], in spaces to receive resilient sheet flooring during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than [55 deg F ]or more than [95 deg F ].

C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient sheet flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after resilient sheet flooring installation.

E. Install resilient sheet flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTER

1. Mannington Commerical

2.2 SELECTED PRODUCT

1. Magna Inlaid Sheet Flooring (Non-Phthalate Construction)

B. Size: 6’

C. Wearlayer Thickness: 0.055

D. Overall Thickness: 0.080



E. Pattern Repeat: Random Repeat, Reverse Sheet for Seaming.

F. Testing: ASTM, Type 2, Grade 1, Class A

G. Warranty: Limited 5 year commercial warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives

and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than [9] pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of [3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. ] in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum [75] percent relative humidity level.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.



E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet flooring.

3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.

B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.

C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows:

1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least

6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams.

D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

I. Seamless Installation:

1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.

2. Chemically Bonded Seams: Bond seams with chemical-bonding compound to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare seams and apply compound to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps, overlays, or excess bonding compound on flooring surfaces.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient sheet flooring.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient sheet flooring installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.



3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient sheet flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.


096813 TILE CARPETING LBHA Addition



A. Carpet tile. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS





B. Product data: For each type of product indicated including:

1. Carpet. 2. Adhesive. 3. Accessories.

C. Product samples: Minimum of two (2) tile samples for each:

1. Color. 2. Carpet style. 3. Pattern. 4. Texture.

a. Size: 12” x 12” minimum.



D. Maintenance data: Submit manufacturer’s recommendations for:

1. Care. 2. Cleaning. 3. Maintenance.


A. Installer qualifications, either:

1. Certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board. 2. Has regularly engaged in carpet installation work and completed a minimum of five (5) comparable

size installations in the past two (2) years.

B. Requirements of regulatory agencies:

1. Flame spread: Rating not exceeding 75 when tested in accordance with provisions of ASTM Standard E84 “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.”

2. Flammability: Pass ASTM D2859-70T (DOC-FF-1-70) test. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS



A. Temperature requirements: Maintain materials and areas of work at temperatures between 70° F. and

90° F. for not less than 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation.

1. Comply with CRI 104:

a. Section 7.2, “Site Conditions, Temperature and Humidity”. b. Section 7.12, “Ventilation.”

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Carpet subcontractor: Furnish a written two (2) year warranty for installation from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Written warranty to Owner shall state that the carpet installer will promptly correct defects in

workmanship without cost to Owner.

B. Manufacturer’s standard warranty for the lifetime of the carpet which warrants the following:

1. No more than 10% face yard loss by weight in normal use. 2. No excessive static discharge. 3. No loss of tuft bind strength, as tested in accordance with ASTM D1335-67. 4. No:

a. Delamination. b. Edge raveling. c. Snags. d. Runs.

C. Warranty: Lifetime Commercial limited.


A. Milliken C. Or approved.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Carpet (CP1): Milliken

1. Style name: Color Field. 2. Color: # PAT-180 Stone. 3. Construction: Tufted, Textured Loop. 4. Gauge: 1/12”. 5. Stitches per inch: 9.8 per inch. 6. Finished pile thickness: 0.08”. 7. Dye method: DCP (Digital Color Placement) 8. Tufted Face weight: 15 oz/yd². 9. Backing Materials:

a. Primary: PVC-Free Underscore ES Cushion

10. Product size: 9.85” x 39.4” 11. Installation method: Ashlar. 12. Indoor Air Quality: Green Label Plus certified.

B. Carpet (CP2): Milliken.

1. Style name: Sepio.



2. Style name: Aegis 3. Color: # AEG118-133 Castle 4. Construction: Tufted, Textured Loop 5. Tile Size: 19.7” x 19.7” 6. Yarn Type: 50% ECONYL SDN Type 6 Multifilament, 50% SDN Type 6 Mono-and Multifilament. 7. Tufted Face Weight: 27.6 oz/sq.yd. 8. Finished Pile Height: 0.254 in. 9. Average Density: 5,678 10. Standard Backing: PVC-free Underscore ES Cushion

C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Adhesive: Water-resistant-mildew-resistant, non-staining type that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended by carpet manufacturer.


A. Fill cracks and holes with leveling compound. B. Remove dust from surface to receive carpet by vacuuming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104 recommendations for space ventilation during and after carpet tile installation. B. Where feasible, carpet tiles shall be installed after the installation of materials or finishes which have high

short-term emissions of:

1. VOC’s. 2. Formaldehyde. 3. Particulates. 4. Other air-borne compounds which may be absorbed by or settle on the carpet tiles.

a. Materials with high short-term emissions include, but are not limited to:

i. Adhesives. ii. Sealants and glazing compounds (specifically those with petrochemical vehicles or

carriers). iii. Paint. iv. Wood preservatives and finishes. v. Control and / or expansion joint fillers. vi. Hard finishes requiring adhesive installation. vii. Gypsum board (with associated finish processes and products). viii. Composite or engineered wood products with formaldehyde binders.

C. When installed over concrete slabs, verify compatibility of carpet tile and adhesives with:

1. Curing compounds. 2. Leveling agents. 3. Sealing agents used for slab preparation.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Remove all:

1. Dirt. 2. Soiled spots. 3. Excessive adhesive and scraps from surface of carpet. 4. Use carpet manufacturer’s recommended materials and methods for conditions involved.

B. Replace carpet tiles with acceptable specified carpet as directed by Architect.



1. Objectionable blemishes include:

a. Excessive tears. b. Frays and / or pulls.

3.4 REMNANTS

A. Package in appropriate protective wrapping. B. Label appropriately. C. Deliver to Owner all excess tiles.


A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. B. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which

have been:





D. Remove waste materials from Project site upon work completion or sooner and dispose of lawfully.


092900 SPECIAL WALL SURFACING LBHA Addition



A. Section Includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels with Sandstone surface texture.






B. Product data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s:

a. Literature on each material proposed for this project. b. Product data. c. Installation instructions.

C. Product sample: Minimum of one (1) sample for each:

1. Color. 2. Style. 3. Pattern. 4. Texture.

a. Size: 6” x 6” minimum




A. Storage and Protection:

1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions. 2. At temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

a. Store panels indoors. b. Lay panels flat.

i. Do not stand panels on edge.



c. Protect panels from moisture. d. Do not store panels:

i. In contact with the floor. ii. Against an outside wall.

B. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush.

1. Avoid abrasive action.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Install panels between 60° and 75° F (15° and 24° C) and relative humidity below 65%.

1. Ideally at the same conditions as the room’s normal operating temperatures after building is occupied.

B. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by

adhesive manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable companies:

1. Crane Composites 23525 W. Eames Street, Channahon, IL 60410-3220 Telephone: 888-DECOFRP E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.frpdesignsolutions.com

2. Or approved.

B. Decorative Lightly Textured Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels

1. VARIETEX CLASS A. 2. Surface Texture: Sandstone. 3. Thickness: 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). 4. Color: White.

C. Panel adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.


A. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that:

1. Corners are:

a. Plumb. b. Straight.

2. Surfaces are:



a. Smooth. b. Uniform. c. Clean. d. Free from foreign matter.

3. Nails are countersunk. 4. Joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface.

B. Do not proceed with installation of FRP panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

1. Starting Work will be interpreted as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any

particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prior to installing panels:

1. Remove packaging. 2. Allow panels to acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours.

B. Wall substrate must be dry and free from:

1. Dirt. 2. Dust. 3. Grease. 4. Other contaminants.

C. Walls must be flat and even.

1. Remove high spots. 2. Fill low spots with material acceptable to panel manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Immediately inspect panels for any defects. a. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality.

2. Do not install panels directly over stud framing or furring. 3. When cutting panels, position them so that the saw blade enters the finished HPL

side first to avoid chipping or damage. 4. Protect decorative face of panel by covering work area. 5. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive

bead left by trowel.

a. Do not allow adhesive to skin over.

B. Joint Seam Treatment: Install panels using color-matched acrylic latex caulk, per manufacturer’s recommendations.


A. Comply with safety standards for cleaning.



B. Including work of other trades, clean, repair, and touch-up, or replace when directed, products which have been:







099000 PAINTS AND COATINGS LBHA Addition



A. This section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated) 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board walls. 7. Plaster. 8. Spray-textured ceilings. 9. Painting and surface preparation for any other unfinished interior surface.

B. Traffic Marking Paint:

1. Parking Stripes.






B. Product data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s literature on each coating proposed for this Project. 2. Include the manufacturer’s recommended minimum dry film thickness for each

coating system.

C. Samples: Three (3) for each required.

1. Color. 2. Finish. 3. Texture. 4. Seek approval by one (1) or more of the following as per Project requirements.



A. Packing and shipping: Deliver materials to site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing:

1. Manufacturer’s name.



2. Trade name. 3. Label analysis.

B. Storage and protection: Store coatings in ventilated spaces with containers closed.

1. Keep dust and open flame from coating materials.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Comply with the following recommendations concerning environmental conditions under which coatings may be applied.

1. Manufacturer’s. 2. Oregon Council of PDCA.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are:

1. From same production run (batch mix) as materials applied. 2. Packaged for storage. 3. Identified with labels describing contents.

a. Quantity: Furnish an additional five (5) percent, but not less than one (1) gallon

of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

H. Acceptable paints:

1. Unless otherwise noted, all materials, names and numbers listed are Sherwin Williams’ products.

2. Acceptable manufacturers of equivalent products are:

a. Ameritone. b. Benjamin Moore. c. Fuller-O’Brien. d. Glidden. e. Martin Senour. f. Miller. g. Pittsburgh. h. Rodda Paint. j. Or approved.

J. Interior primers:

1. Gypsum board Primer: ProMar 200 Wall Primer or Preprite ProBlock. 2. Gypsum board Primer, Restroom(s): ProBlock Primer Interior Oil Base. 3. Wood Primer: EasySand Primer. 4. Metal Primer: 3370 Barrier III - Rust Inhibitive Primer. 5. Concrete Primer: Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer, where required.

K. Interior paint:



1. Gypsum board:

a. Satin Acrylic (LP): ProMar 200 Acrylic Latex Wall Paint, eggshell finish.

2. Gypsum board, Restroom(s):

a. Pro Industrial Pre-Catalized Water-Based Epoxy.

3. Metal:

a. Semi-gloss Alkyd (EN): All Purpose Equipment Enamel (flatten gloss to semi-gloss).

4. Typical Concrete:

a. S-W Loxon XP Waterproofing System, A24 Series. No primer required if

concrete is allowed to cure 28 days.

5. Exposed Structure Ceiling Areas:

a. S-W Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic, B66 Series.

L. Natural Wood Finish: Floors:

1. Residential: Sherwin Williams, MINWAX® Super Fast-Drying Polyurethane for Floors.

a. Color: Clear. b. Finish: Satin sheen.

2. Commercial: Sherwin Williams, ARMORSEAL® Rexthane™ 1 Floor Coating.

a. Color: Clear. b. Finish: Satin sheen.

M. Natural Wood Finish: Trim, Cabinetry:

1. Commercial: Sherwin Williams, Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish.

c. Color: Clear. d. Finish: Satin sheen.

N. Exterior primer:

1. Metal:

a. Sherwin Williams, DTM Acrylic Primer Finish - corrosion resistant.

2. Typical Concrete Walls: Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer, where required.

P. Exterior paint:

1. Metal:



a. Gloss Enamel: Sherwin Williams, DTM Acrylic Primer Finish - corrosion resistant.

2. Typical Concrete Walls:

a. S-W Loxon XP Waterproofing System, A24 Series. No primer required if

concrete is allowed to cure 28 days. b. Or approved.

Q. Traffic Marking Paint:

1. Sherwin Williams: Setfast Acrylic Latex.

a. Color: White. b. Finish: Flat. c. Drying Schedule: To Touch-60 minutes. d. Reflectance: 84% minimum. e. Scrub Resistance: 400 cycles minimum. f. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.

R. Colors: As selected from all of manufacturers’ available colors by one (1) or more of the

following dependent on Conditions of the Contract:

1. Architect.

2. Designer.

3. Owner.

4. Owner’s Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area and conditions under which painting work is to be applied. B. Do not paint over:

1. Dirt. 2. Grease. 3. Rust. 4. Blistered paint. 5. Wet substrates. 6. Surface conditions detrimental to durable paint film.

C. Start of painting work will be interpreted as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within

any particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

1. Cover and protect adjacent finished surfaces. 2. Remove prefinished items or provide surface applied protection for:

a. Machined surfaces. b. Finished cover plates. c. Door hardware.



d. Lighting fixtures. e. Windows. f. Other prefinished items in place and not scheduled for field finishing.

3. Cover and protect finished metal including:

a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Brass. d. Bronze.

4. Cover and protect moving parts of operating units and equipment identification,

including:

a. Wiring diagrams. b. Performance ratings. c. Name plates. d. Code required labels.

5. Remove protective covers and reinstall removed items after finishing adjacent

surfaces. 6. Sand existing natural finished wood doors.

B. Surface preparation:

1. Comply with coating manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning each substrate. 2. Apply prime coat to fabricated items which have not been prime coated by fabricator. 3. Touch up damaged shop primed surfaces prior to field finishing.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum board:

1. First coat: Gypsum board primer. 2. Second and third coat: Acrylic (LP).

B. Hollow metal doorframes:

1. Spot prime factory primer if necessary with metal primer. 2. Two (2) coats of Semi-gloss Alkyd (EN).

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Methods and coverage:

1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.

a. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required.

2. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with coating manufacturer’s directions.

3. Use techniques best suited for the painting material and substrate surfaces.

a. If airless spray is used for wall and ceiling surfaces, back roll the surface with roller to achieve roller texture.



4. For opaque finishes, apply additional coats when any of the following shows through

the final paint coat:

a. Undercoats. b. Stains. c. Other defects.

i. Until paint film is of uniform:

aa. Finish. bb. Color. cc. Appearance.

5. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate.

a. Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than amount recommended by

coating manufacturer.

B. Additional Requirements: High Performance Epoxy Coatings can be used as the moisture proofing surface of public restrooms containing one (1) water closet if the following conditions are met:

1. In public restrooms, epoxy coating must be installed per Oregon State Interpretation

No. 2004 OSSC 1210: Two (2) continuous beads of approved caulking material between the sole plate and the vinyl sheet floor covering with a bead of caulking material at the juncture of the floor and finished wall, covered with 4-inch rubber base shoe sealed to the floor with a bead of caulking material between the base shoe and the floor and between the upper edge of the base shoe and the wall.

a. Base shoe interior and exterior corners may be factory made.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Correcting defective surfaces:

1. Remove finish and repaint surfaces not in compliance with specified requirements until finished surface meets specified requirements.

2. Repaint work not meeting minimum dry film thickness. 3.6 CLEANING AND REPAIRING




C. Remove paint splatters from:



1. Concrete walks. 2. Finished flooring. 3. Trim. 4. Glass. 5. Similar finished surfaces.

D. Remove rags and empty containers at the end of each working day.






102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

LBHA Addition


SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 4. Healthcare accessories. 5. Warm-air dryers. 6. Childcare accessories. 7. Underlavatory guards. 8. Custodial accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work

and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


LBHA Addition



A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: [15]<Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

D. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

E. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

F. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:


LBHA Addition


1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.

B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2. Description: Double-roll dispenser 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)

C. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2. Mounting: [Recessed][Semirecessed][Deck mounted, recessed][Surface mounted]. 3. Minimum Capacity: [400 C-fold or 525 multifold towels][600 C-fold or 800 multifold

towels][400 single-fold towels]<Insert capacity>. 4. Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)][ABS plastic, gray]<Insert

material and finish>. 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.

D. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser 1. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permits controlled delivery of paper rolls in

preset lengths per stroke. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) 4. Lockset: Tumbler type.

E. Grab Bar : 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches . 4. Configuration and Length: [As indicated on Drawings]

F. Seat-Cover Dispenser <Insert drawing designation>: 1. Mounting: [Surface mounted] 2. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin) 3. Lockset: Tumbler type.

G. Mirror Unit <Insert drawing designation>: 1. Frame: [Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick

a. Corners: [Manufacturer's standard] 2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated

below.

a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.


LBHA Addition


3. Size: [As indicated on Drawings]

H. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

I. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of [six]<Insert number> keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf , when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

LBHA Addition



A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. 2. Fire Extinguishers.





A. Submit materials In accordance with conditions of the Contract and Division 01; Section 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show:

a. Layout. b. Dimensions. c. Details of construction. d. Methods of joining to other work. e. Required clearances. f. Finishes. g. Accessories. h. Other pertinent items.

2. Manufacturer's standard printed literature may be substituted provided required

information is included. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Manufacturers

1. J. L. Industries, Inc. 2. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company. 3. Potter-Roemer, Division of Smith Industries, Inc. 4. The Williams Bros. Company. 5. Modern Metal Products. 6. Or approved.

B. Model: Similar to J.L. Industries Clear Vu. (1 hr. rated) C. Size: Accommodate fire extinguishers specified below. D. Mounting: Full or Semi-recessed and flat trimmed with standard bracket. E. Door and Frame Material: Satin Clear Anodized Aluminum. F. Door Glazing: Clear Acrylic Plastic convex bubble. G. Cylinder Lock: Not required.


LBHA Addition


H. Cabinet Interior: White enamel. J. Extinguisher support: Manufacturer's standard brackets to receive fire extinguishers

specified below. K. Extent of Work: Provide as shown on Drawings. L. Installation: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, mount cabinet so that extinguisher top is

54 inches above floor. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fire Extinguishers:

1. ADA compliant. 2. Manufacturer: Contractor’s choice. 3. Type: OSHA-approved and U.L. rated for type A, B, and C fires. 4. Size: 10 lb. capacity 5. Color: Red. 6. Fill and service extinguishers prior to project Substantial Completion.

a. Attach certificate of service, including date, to each fire extinguisher.

7. Extent of work: Provide extinguishers for each fire extinguisher cabinet specified

above. 8. Installation: Mount in cabinets.


A. Inspect openings for trueness and alignment.

1. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory for installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Follow Manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. 2. Secure specialties plumb, level, square, and true as applicable.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:

1. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, mount cabinet so that extinguisher handle is

48 inches above floor.

C. Fire Extinguishers:

1. Mount in cabinets. 3.3 CLEANING AND REPAIRING



1. Soiled.


LBHA Addition


2. Discolored. 3. Damaged by Work of this section.






123623.13 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

LBHA Addition


SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.



B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for [plumbing fixtures][faucets][soap dispensers][electrical switches and outlets][and other items] installed in plastic-laminate countertops.

2. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Plastic laminates.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates,[8 by 10 inches, for each [type,] color, pattern, and surface finish[, with one sample applied to core material][and specified edge material applied to one edge].

2. Wood-grain plastic laminates, 12 by 24 inches for each [type,] pattern and surface finish[, with one sample applied to core material][and specified edge material applied to one edge].


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.


A. Do not deliver countertops until painting and similar operations that could damage countertops have been completed in installation areas. If countertops must be stored in other than


LBHA Addition


installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

D. Established Dimensions: Where countertops are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where countertops are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, [Grade HGS][Grade HGL][Grade HGF][Grade HGP].


a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart.


a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on Architect’s plans.

2. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.


LBHA Addition


D. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces

E. Core Material: [Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard

F. Core Material at Sinks: medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.

G. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch .

1. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top.

H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

I. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, [lack, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide " [OG][SG] series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.


A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

B. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: [Unpigmented contact cement]

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive [or adhesive specified above for faces].

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

B. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.


LBHA Addition


C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

D. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing countertops, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.

C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.

1. Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches . Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.

D. Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches .

E. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.


LBHA Addition


F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes [to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c.] [and] [to walls with adhesive].

3. Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer.


A. Repair damaged and defective countertops, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean countertops on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION 123623.13

142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS LBHA Addition



A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include:

1. Capacities. 2. Sizes. 3. Performances. 4. Operations. 5. Safety features. 6. Finishes. 7. Similar information.

C. Shop Drawings: Show:

1. Plans. 2. Elevations. 3. Sections. 4. Large-scale details indicating:

a. Service at each landing. b. Machine room layout. c. Coordination with building structure. d. Relationships with other construction. e. Locations of equipment and signals.

1) Indicate variations from:

a) Specified requirements. b) Maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure

at points of support. c) Maximum and average power demands.

D. Samples: For exposed finishes. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that items as shown

and specified on Drawings, are adequate for elevator system being provided for:

1. Hoistway. 2. Pit. 3. Machine room layout and dimensions. 4. Electrical service.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data. G. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities

having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1and elevator design requirements for earthquake loads in ASCE 7.

1. Project's seismic design category is C. 2. Elevator importance factor is 1.0.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural &

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one (1) year's time period full maintenance service as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity by skilled employees of elevator Installer.

1. Include:

a. Monthly preventive maintenance. b. Repair or replacement of worn or defective components. c. Lubrication. d. Cleaning. e. Adjusting.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Provide products by one (1) of the following:

1. Otis Elevator Co. 2. Schindler Elevator Corp. 3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator. 4. Or approved.

2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, including standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

C. Hydraulic Fluid:

1. Nontoxic.



2. Readily biodegradable. 3. Fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with:

a. Antioxidant. b. Anticorrosive. c. Antifoaming. d. Metal-passivating additives.

1) Hydraulic fluid to be approved by elevator manufacturer for use with

elevator equipment.

a) Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

aa) "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc. bb) Or approved.

2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation system indicated.

B. Single-Car Auxiliary Operations:

1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power:

a. Car is returned to a designated floor. b. Car parks with doors open.

1) Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return

operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at main lobby.

2. Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power

a. Car is lowered to the lowest floor. b. Doors open. c. Car shuts down.

2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door-reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. 1. Interruption of one (1) or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and

reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy when the reopening device is reactivated.

2.5 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive:

1. Non-removable wall panels. 2. Car roof. 3. Access doors. 4. Power door operators.



5. Ventilation.

a. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1.

b. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard core with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim.

1) Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect or

Designer or Owner from elevator manufacturer's full range.

c. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction. d. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. e. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent

acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. 2.6 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with

1. Track systems. 2. Hardware. 3. Sills. 4. Other accessories.

a. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting

frames with reinforced head sections.

B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors and Transoms: Flush, hollow-metal construction. 3. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.

2.7 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled.

1. Fabricate lighted elements with long-life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other

permanent, non-yellowing translucent plastic diffusers.

B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations.

1. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated, at accessible height as required by current ADA and ADAAG regulations.

2. Provide signage as required by current ADA and ADAAG regulations.

C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1. On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and

identifies elevator location to monitoring station.



2. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset. 3. Provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when

monitoring station has responded. 4. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with:

a. Identification. b. Instructions for use. c. Battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet

in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service as specified by Fire Alarm Contractor.

E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station.

1. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or

passing each of the floors served. 2. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.

F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows.

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and

direction of travel.

1. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. I. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations,

with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.8 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator Description:

1. Type: Holed, telescoping cylinder or Holeless, beside-the-car, telescoping, dual cylinder.

2. Rated Load: 2500 lb. 3. Rated Speed: 175 fpm or 125 fpm. 4. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 5. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Battery-powered lowering. b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. c. Nuisance call cancel.

6. Car Enclosures:

a. Meet ADA. b. Meet current State Structural Specialty Code for elevator cab size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel.



1. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to

maintain alignment. 2. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid

overstressing guides.

B. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. C. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing.

1. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide the following as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment: a. Other protective coverings. b. Barriers. c. Devices. d. Signs. e. Procedures.

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of

correction.

a. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES LBHA Addition


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Plumbing fixtures to comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water:

1. Flow rate. 2. Consumption.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit materials in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01; Sec-tion 01 33 00, “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture. C. Submittals shall include manufacturer’s catalog literature for all products used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (To Be Selected). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals. B. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate

when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

C. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate.

1. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.

D. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. E. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. F. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. G. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout. H. Install the following individual items with cleanouts at the fixture:

1. Supply inlets. 2. Supply stops. 3. Supply risers. 4. Tubular brass traps.

J. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. K. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. 2. Omit traps on indirect wastes.

a. Unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations

and within cabinets and millwork.

1. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES LBHA Addition


M. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant.

1. Match sealant color to fixture color.

N. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing

equipment. END OF SECTION 22 40 00

265000 LIGHTING LBHA Addition



A. Interior Luminaires. B. Lamps. C. Luminaire Accessories.




1. Review other Sections for requirements related to work of this Section. 1.3 FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A. As noted on Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For each luminaire type, include:

1. Outline drawings. 2. Lamp and ballast data. 3. Support points. 4. Weights. 5. Accessory information.

C. Shop Drawings: Show:

1. Location of each item. 2. Dimensioned plans and elevations. 3. Large-scale details. 4. Attachment devices. 5. Other components.

D. Provide Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions. E. Operation Instruction and Maintenance Data: Submit materials in compliance with Division

01; Section 01 78 02, “Operation and Maintenance Data”. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Prior to ordering lighting fixtures, verify conditions for mounting lighting fixtures and select proper mounting hardware.


A. Recessed fixtures shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed without leaks or gaps.

265000 LIGHTING LBHA Addition


1. Where necessary, install heat resistant non-rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or

moisture from entering between fixture trim and the surface to which they are mounted.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Lamp each fixture with the suitable lamp catalogued for the specific fixture type as indicated by the fixture manufacturer. 2.3 LUMINAIRES

A. See plans for fixture information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable mounting frames where required for recessed fixtures.

B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation.

1. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the

Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2 WIRING

A. Recessed fixtures served from a junction box above the ceiling may be connected with 3/8-inch flex, 2 No. 18.










321313 CONCRETE PAVING LBHA Addition


SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Concrete Paving[.][Including the Following:]

1. Driveways. 2. Roadways. 3. Parking lots. 4. Curbs and gutters. 5. Walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.



B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:



1. Aggregates: Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Stamped Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems.

B. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete paving mixtures.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

B. Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F , uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

C. Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.



3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

B. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

C. Epoxy-Coated Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel.

D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 ; deformed.

E. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars.

G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars; assembled with clips.

H. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M,[galvanized].

I. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.

J. Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A; coated, [plain][deformed].

K. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars[; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating]. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.



L. Epoxy-Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars.

M. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 ; deformed.

N. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A , internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

O. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

P. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.

Q. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, [gray] portland cement [Type I/II] 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, [Class C] [or] [Class F]. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, [Type IS, portland blast-furnace

slag][Type IP, portland-pozzolan][Type IL, Portland-limestone][Type IT, ternary blended] cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M [Class 1N] uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size:[1 inch ] nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.



E. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, [Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry] [or] [cotton mats].

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems. b. ChemMasters, Inc. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. d. Kaufman Products, Inc.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: [ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork] in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:

1. [Types I and II, nonload bearing][Types IV and V, load bearing], for bonding hardened

E. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 sieve.

2.7 STAMPED DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome.




a. ADA Solutions, Inc. b. Advanced Surfaces Inc.

2. Size of Stamp: One piece, matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings.

B. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats.


a. Advanced Surfaces Inc. b. Scofield, L. M. Company. c. Specialty Concrete Products, Inc.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 , for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that comply with or exceed requirements.

B. Cementitious Materials: [Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.][Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:]

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Slag Cement: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan

not exceeding 25 percent.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: [6] percent plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum

aggregate size.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use [water-reducing admixture][high-range, water-reducing admixture][high-range, water-reducing and retarding admixture][plasticizing and retarding admixture] in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi 2. Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches ] plus or minus 1 inch .



2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M [and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. , increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. .

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below [concrete paving] to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction [and repeat in perpendicular direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph .

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons .

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of [1/2 inch ] according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.



B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M.

G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed

against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.



C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of [50 feet ] unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows[, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving]:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a[1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within [3 inches ] either way from centers of dowels.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within [3 inches ] either way from centers of dowels.

3. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a [1/4-inch ] radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. [Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.]

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation[, steel reinforcement,] and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface [and steel reinforcement] before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.



E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies[, reinforcement,] or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating [reinforcement] [and] [dowels] joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.

3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES

A. Monolithic Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in paving surface as follows:

1. Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions.



2. Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue finishing operations.

3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate.

4. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.

3.9 DETECTABLE WARNING INSTALLATION

A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified in Section 321726 "Tactile Warning Surfacing."

1. Tolerance for Opening Size: [Plus 1/4 inch , no minus]

B. Cast-in-Place Detectable Warning Tiles: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of tiles specified in Section 321726 "Tactile Warning Surfacing." Screed surface of concrete where tiles are to be installed to elevation, so that edges of installed tiles will be flush with surrounding concrete paving. Embed tiles in fresh concrete to comply with Section 321726 "Tactile Warning Surfacing" immediately after screeding concrete surface.

C. Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp-mat manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed. 2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. 3. Stamping: [While initially finished concrete is plastic][After application and final floating of

pigmented mineral dry-shake hardener], accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface. Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp-mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats.

4. Trimming: After [24]<Insert number> hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes.

5. Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High-pressure-wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.



D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by [moisture curing], [moisture-retaining-cover curing], [curing compound], [or] [a combination of these] as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches , and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch . 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch , minus 1/4 inch . 3. Surface: Gap below 10-feet-long; unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch . 4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12

inches of tie bar. 5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch . 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch . 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per

12 inches of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches . 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch , no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch , no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each [100 cu. yd. ][5000 sq. ft. ] or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.



2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi .

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.



D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS LBHA Addition


SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to concrete pavement.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site].

1. Review methods and procedures related to marking pavement including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Pavement aging period before application of pavement markings. b. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of

traffic during installation period.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Shop Drawings: For pavement markings.

1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work.

2. Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of City of Albany and State of Oregon for pavement-marking work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

321723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS LBHA Addition



A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of [40 deg F for alkyd materials][55 deg F for water-based materials], and not exceeding 95 deg F .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Per Section 099000 Paints and Coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of [30] days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of [15 mils ].

1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to pavement. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond the stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath the stencil.

2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. .

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
